Owner's Manual

ManualsBrandsLG Manualscomputers & electronicsLGH340

www.lg.com MFL69538401 (1.0)

USER GUIDE

ﻲﺑﺮﻋ

LG-H340

ENGLISH

Summary of content (179 pages)

PAGE 1
‫ ﻋﺮﺑﻲ‬ENGLISH USER GUIDE LG-H340 www.lg.com MFL69538401 (1.
PAGE 2
PAGE 3
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺑﻲ‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻷﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻴﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻭﻓﻘﹰ ﺎ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ )‪ (OS‬ﻭﺗﺨﻀﻊ ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎ ﻣﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ‪ LG‬ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﻢ ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻭﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻷﺷﺨﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﻀﻌﻔﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺒﺼﺮ ﻧﻈﺮﹰﺍ ﻻﺣﺘﻮﺍﺋﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻤﺲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ ©‪ LG Electronics، Inc. 2016‬ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻮﻕ ﻣﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ‪ LG .
PAGE 4
‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﶈﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺁﻣﻦ ﻭﻓﻌﺎﻝ ‪4 .......................‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﻫﺎﻣﺔ‪12 .........................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﹼﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ‪15 ....................‬‬ ‫ﺗﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ‪15 ........................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SIM‬ﺃﻭ ‪ USIM‬ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪17 ..........‬‬ ‫ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪19 ..........................................‬‬ ‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪20 ...................................‬‬ ‫ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪21 ....................................
PAGE 5
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪47 .....................................‬‬ ‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﺮ ‪47 ...................‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ ‪48 ........................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪49 .............................................‬‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪49 .....................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪49 ...........................................‬‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪50 .....................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻌﺮﺽ ‪50 ....................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ‪53 .
PAGE 6
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺁﻣﻦ ﻭﻓﻌﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻴﺪ ﺑﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺃﻣﺮﺍ ﹰ ﺧﻄﺮﺍ ﹰ ﺃﻭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻧﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﻗﺮﺍﺀﺓ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺴﻴﻄﺔ‪ .‬ﻋﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﹼ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺧﻄﺄ‪ ،‬ﺗﻢ ﺗﻀﻤﻴﻦ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺄﻧﻬﺎ ﺗﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﺳﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ‪ .‬ﺗﺠﻤﻊ‬ ‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺨﻄﺄ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﻗﻮﺓ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﻭﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﻣﻌﺮﹼﻑ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﺪﻯ ﺍﻧﻘﻄﺎﻉ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺟﺊ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﺠﻞ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﺳﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ‪ .
PAGE 7
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺎ ﹰ‪ .‬ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﹼﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃ ﹼﻥ ﹼ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻭﺻﻴﺎﻧﺘﻪ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻴﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺸﻮﺍﺣﻦ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫ﹼ‬ ‫ﺇﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻱ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺑﻄﺎﻝ ﺃﻱ ﻛﻔﺎﻟﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﺗﻨﻄﺒﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺧﻄﻴﺮﺍ ﹰ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻔﻜﻴﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪ .
PAGE 8
‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻀﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺋﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺬﺍﻛﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ؛ ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺷﺮﻃﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺷﻲﺀ ﺣﺎﺩ ﺇﺫ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻟﺤﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻌﺮﹼﺽ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻟﻠﺴﻮﺍﺋﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺫﻥ ﺑﺤﺬﺭ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺩﻭﻥ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺳﺒﺐ ﻳﺪﻋﻮﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺟﺎﺝ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺴﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻤﺴﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺘﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺻﻼﺣﻪ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﻜﺴﻮﺭﹰﺍ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺘﺤﻮﻻ ﹰ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﺤﻄﻤﺎ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﺸﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻔﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﺟﺎﺟﻴﺔ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺳﻮﺀ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪.
PAGE 9
‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﺎ ﹰ ﻣﺤﻤﻮﻻ ﹰ ﺑﺎﻟﻴﺪ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺩﻭﻣﺎ ﹰ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﺒﺎﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﻗﹼﻒ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻖ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﺟﺎﺑﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺘﺪﻋﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺆﺛﺮ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ‪ RF‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺒﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﺘﻴﺮﻳﻮ ﻭﻣﻌﺪﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺒﺔ ﻣﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻜﻴﺲ ﻫﻮﺍﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺇﻋﺎﻗﺔ ﻋﻤﻠﻪ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺜﺒﺘﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺤﻤﻮﻟﺔ‪ .
PAGE 10
‫ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺠﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺠﻴﺮ ﺟﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺘﺰﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻴﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻷﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺗ ﹼﺘﺴﻢ ﺃﺟﻮﺍﺅﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻼﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭ‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺤﻄﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺰﻭﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﻗﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﻮﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﻴﻤﻴﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﻨﻘﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻏﺎﺯ ﺃﻭ ﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻼﺷﺘﻌﺎﻝ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺘﻔﺠﺮﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺠﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ ﻧﻔﺴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻠﺤﻘﺎﺗﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺋﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻄﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﺴ ﹼﺒﺐ ﺑﺤﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺋﺮﺓ‪.
PAGE 11
‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻣﺼﻤﻤﺔ ﻹﻃﺎﻟﺔ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻭﺷﻮﺍﺣﻦ ‪ LG‬ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﻓﺸﻮﺍﺣﻦ ‪LG‬‬ ‫ﹼ‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﻜﻴﻚ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻀﻬﺎ ﻟﺤﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻓﻆ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻈﺎﻓﺔ‬ ‫ﹼ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﺒﺢ ﺃﺩﺍﺅﻫﺎ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻘﺒﻮﻝ‪ .‬ﻓﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺕ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﺑﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﻋﺪ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﺻﻼﺣﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ‪.
PAGE 12
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺣﺪﺙ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺤﺴﻴﻨﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻟﻠﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ‪ .‬ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺯﻳﺎﺭﺓ ‪ http://www.lg.com/common/index.jsp‬ﻭﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﺪ ﻭﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻠﻦ ‪ LG Electronics‬ﺑﻤﻮﺟﺒﻪ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ‪ LG-H340‬ﻳﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﺣﻜﺎﻡ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬ ‫ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ‪ .
PAGE 13
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﻳﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ‬ ‫ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻔﺎﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻣﻨﺸﺂﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﻜﻮﻣﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺳﻴﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﻳﻢ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻌﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻠﺒﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﻭﺻﺤﺔ ﺍﻹﻧﺴﺎﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺼﻠﺔ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﻳﻢ‪ ،‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺑﻤﻜﺘﺐ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺪﻳﻨﺘﻚ ﺃﻭ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻔﺎﻳﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺤﻞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬ ‫ﺍﺷﺘﺮﻳﺖ ﻣﻨﻪ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.
PAGE 14
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﻫﺎﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﻗﺮﺍﺀﺓ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ!‬ ‫ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﻭﺻﻒ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﺟﻬﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻤﻤﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﺳﺘﻼﻡ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫‪ 10‬ﻣﻴﻐﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‪ .‬ﻟﺬﺍ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻭﺣﺬﻑ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻟﺘﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.
PAGE 15
‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﺴﺘﻬﻠﻚ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻨﺰﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻠﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻣﻔﺘﻮﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﻭﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﹼﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻄﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪ .‬ﻋﻼﻭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﹸﻠﻐﻰ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻐﻄﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﹼ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺛﻮﻕ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺳﻮﻕ ™‪ .
PAGE 16
‫ﺗﺠﻤﺪﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫‪ .5‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﹼ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﺠﻤﺪﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺛﻢ ﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.
PAGE 17
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﹼﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‬ ‫ﺗﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﺫﻥ‬ ‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﺸﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﺷﻴﺎﺀ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻳﺒﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪ :‬ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﺸﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﺷﻴﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻳﺒﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻠﻘﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺋﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﺸﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﺷﻴﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻳﺒﺔ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﻭﺇﻗﻔﺎﻝ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺤﺴﺲ ﺍﻗﺘﺮﺍﺏ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺫﻥ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻳﻄﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﻳﻤﻨﻌﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ ﻣﻦ ﺩﻭﻥ ﻗﺼﺪ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‪.
PAGE 18
‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﻜﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ‬ ‫ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫‪16‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ‪USB/‬‬ ‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬ ‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻗﺼﻴﺮﺓ ﻟﻘﻔﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫)ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻔﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬ ‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻄﻮﻻ ﹰ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪Capture+‬‬ ‫ﻣﻄﻮﻻ ﹰ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﹼ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﹼﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‬
PAGE 19
‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SIM‬ﺃﻭ ‪ USIM‬ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SIM‬ﺃﻭ ‪ USIM‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻮﻓﺮﻫﺎ ﻣﻮﻓﺮ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻤﻨﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﻣﺴﻚ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﻴﺪ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺑﻘﻮﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺎﻟﻴﺪ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ‬ ‫ﻣﺒﻴﻦ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﺑﻬﺎﻡ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﹼ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻼﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﺒﻴﻦ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﹼ‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺃﺩ ﹺﺧﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SIM‬ﻓﻲ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SIM‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﹼ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﻫﺒﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻮﺟﻬﺔ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ‪.
PAGE 20
‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﻓﺨﺬ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ .SIM‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ ،SIM‬ﹸ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ‪ LG‬ﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪ :‬ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ‪ microSIM‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺩﺭﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎﺀ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻣﻊ ﺣﺠﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺴﺘﻘﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻪ ‪.
PAGE 21
‫ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﻤﺮﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﻴﺒﻞ ‪.USB‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﻮﺍﺣﻦ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﻴﺒﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ‪ LG‬ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻣﺖ ﺷﻮﺍﺣﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﺤﺎﻕ‬ ‫ﻛﻴﺒﻼﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﺃﻭ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﻲ ﺃﺿﺮﺍﺭ ﻻ ﺗﺸﻤﻠﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻜﻔﺎﻟﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻰ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪ .
PAGE 22
‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ microSD‬ﺗﺼﻞ ﺳﻌﺘﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 32‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻭﻓﻘﹰ ﺎ ﻟﻠﺸﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﹼﻌﺔ ﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻭﻧﻮﻋﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻟﺤﺎﻕ ﺿﺮﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺗﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻧﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﺤﻮﻫﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺨﻔﻴﺾ ﻋﻤﺮ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻧﺰﻉ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ‪.
PAGE 23
‫ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﻓﺼﻠﻬﺎ ﺃﻭﻻ ﹰ ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺁﻣﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫< ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ < ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻭ‪< USB‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ < <‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺃﺯﹺﻝ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻭﺍﺳﺤﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺝ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗ ﹺﺰﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻗﻴﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻓﻘﺪﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻔﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﺤﺎﻕ ﺿﺮﺭ ﺑﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﻤﻞ ﻣﺴﺆﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺴﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺠﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺳﻮﺀ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺗﺎﻟﻔﺔ ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻓﻘﺪﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪.
PAGE 24
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪ :‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ‪ Google‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻧﻘﺶ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ ﻭﺗﺬﻛﹼﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺨﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ ﻟـ ‪PIN‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺃﻧﺸﺄﺗﻬﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻧﻘﺶ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ! ‪Smart Lock‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ‪ Smart Lock‬ﻟﺘﺴﻬﻴﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﻹﺑﻘﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻘﻔﻞ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺘﺼﻼ ﹰ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﻣﻮﺛﻮﻕ ﺑﻪ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺟ ﹰﺪﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻣﺄﻟﻮﻑ ﻣﺜﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻝ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻌﺮﹼﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺟﻬﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪Smart Lock‬‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫<‬ ‫<‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ < ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ < ‪.
PAGE 25
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺤﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻤﻴﺤﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ – ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﺈﺻﺒﻊ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻭﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺃﺣﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ – ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻨﺼﺮﹰﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺭﻓﻊ‬ ‫ﺇﺻﺒﻌﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﻴﻦ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﺴﺤﺐ ‪ -‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻨﺼﺮﹰﺍ ﻣﺎ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻭﺟﻴﺰﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺇﺻﺒﻌﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺩﻭﻥ‬ ‫ﺭﻓﻌﻪ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺳﺤﺐ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺿﻌﻬﺎ‪.
PAGE 26
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻫﻲ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻣﺜﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑـ ‪ Google‬ﻟﺘﻤﻨﺤﻚ ﻭﺻﻮﻻ ﹰ ﻓﻮﺭﻳﹰﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﻩ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻱ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻹﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﻗﻮﺓ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﻭﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺭﻣﻮﺯ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺷﻌﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.
PAGE 27
‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﺜﻘﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‬ ‫ﻭﻣﺮﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﺭ ﻭﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻱ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺣﺪﻳﺜﹰﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻟﻤﺲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻓﺘﺢ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻌﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﹼ‬ ‫ﻳﻮﻓﺮ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺎﺕ ﻣﺤﻴﻄﺔ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺑﻬﺪﻑ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ‬ ‫ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﻭﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ‪.
PAGE 28
‫ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫• ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺘﻪ < ﺍﺳﺤﺒﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬ ‫• ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻭﺍﺳﺤﺒﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‪ .‬ﺛﻢ ﺣﺮﹼﺭﻩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻭﺍﺳﺤﺒﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﺘﻌﺬ ﹼﺭ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫‪.
PAGE 29
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪ :‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺎﺩﹰﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺷﻌﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﹼﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﻓﺘﺢ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻹﺷﻌﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻹﺷﻌﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ .‬ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻹﺷﻌﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻣﺮﹼﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻌﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺷﻌﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺢ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﺮﺅﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ‪ ،‬ﺣﺮﹼﻙ ﺇﺻﺒﻌﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ‪ .
PAGE 30
‫ﺗﻢ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﺷﻌﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺻﻒ ﻣﻮﺟﺰ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﻟﻌﺮﺿﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻹﺷﻌﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻺﺑﻼﻍ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺮﺩ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻭﺃﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ ﻭﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ‬ ‫ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻫﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺃﺷﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ‪.
PAGE 31
‫ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻧﺼﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺇﻥ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻟﺔ ﻧﺸﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪ :‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﻓﻘﹰ ﺎ ﻟﻠﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻧﺺ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﻘﻞ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻧﺺ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻭﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻮﺹ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﺑﺎﻷﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻴﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﺮﺗﻴﻦ ﻟﻠﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺑﺄﺣﺮﻑ ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪ .
PAGE 32
‫ﺍﳌﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻹﻳﻤﺎﺀﺓ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻤﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺇﻳﻤﺎﺀﺓ ﺑﻴﺪﻙ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺘﺎﻥ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻤﺎﺀﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺭﻓﻊ ﻳﺪﻙ ﻭﻫﻲ ﻣﻔﺘﻮﺣﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻜﺘﺸﻔﻬﺎ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﻭﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺛﻢ ﺃﻏﻠﻖ ﻳﺪﻙ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻗﺒﻀﺔ ﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻣﺰﻳ ﹰﺪﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻟﺘﺼﺒﺢ ﺟﺎﻫﺰﹰﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺭﻓﻊ ﻳﺪﻙ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻗﺒﻀﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻜﺘﺸﻔﻬﺎ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﻭﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.
PAGE 33
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻣﺮﺗﻴﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﺘﺴﻬﻴﻞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﺮﺗﻴﻦ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺳﻂ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﺮﺗﻴﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﺎﺭﻏﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺳﺘﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪ :‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺿﻐﻄﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻴﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻰ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﻨﺨﻔﺾ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﹼﻑ‪.
PAGE 34
‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪Knock Code‬‬ ‫ﻋﻴﻨﺘﻪ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﹰ ﺎ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻘﺶ ‪ Knock Code‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﹼ‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Capture+‬‬ ‫ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ‪ Capture+‬ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻣﺬﻛﺮﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ Capture+‬ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻣﺬﻛﺮﺍﺕ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺳﻬﻞ ﻭﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺍﺳﺤﺒﻪ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺃﻧﺸﺊ ﻣﺬﻛﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻷﺣﺪﺙ‪.
PAGE 35
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻹﺻﺒﻊ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ‪ .Capture+‬ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﻇﺎﻓﺮﻙ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫< ﺗﻢ ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﺠﺎﻫﻞ ‪:Capture+‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ < <‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ‬ ‫‪.
PAGE 36
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ‪Google‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪ Google‬ﻟﻠﻤﺮﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻄﻠﺐ ﻣﻨﻚ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺑﺤﺴﺎﺏ‬ ‫‪ Google‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﻄﻠﺐ ﻣﻨﻚ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ‪ Google‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻜﻦ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﻭﺍﺣ ﹰﺪﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ‪Google‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ < ‪.‬‬ ‫< ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ < ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ < ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ <‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪ < Google‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻧﺸﺊ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﹰﺎ ﺟﺪﻳ ﹰﺪﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻹﻛﻤﺎﻝ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺏ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ‪Google‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪.
PAGE 37
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ‬ ‫‪Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺗﻐﻄﻴﺔ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ )‪.(AP‬‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫< ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ< ‪.Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ < <‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻭﺑﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺷﺒﻜﺎﺕ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻣﺤﻤﻴﺔ ﺑﺮﻣﺰ ﻗﻔﻞ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ‪.
PAGE 38
‫‪Bluetooth‬‬ ‫ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺎ ﺑﻌﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺇﻥ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﻗﺼﻴﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻯ ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ‪ ،Bluetooth‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ ﻭﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻼﻳﺪﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﹸﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﺘﻘﻨﻴﺔ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﻭﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﺘﺤﻤﻞ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ‪ LG‬ﻣﺴﺆﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﺪﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﻋﺘﺮﺍﺿﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺳﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻭﺗﻠﻘﻴﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻣﻮﺛﻮﻕ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻭﻣﺤﻤﻴﺔ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪.
PAGE 39
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻋﺒﺮ ‪Bluetooth‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﻠﻔﹰﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺼﺮﹰﺍ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﹰﺍ ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻋﺒﺮ ‪.Bluetooth‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺰﻭﺩ ﺑﺘﻘﻨﻴﺔ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﻭﺍﻻﻗﺘﺮﺍﻥ ﺑﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻧﻈﺮﹰﺍ ﻻﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﻣﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﻭﻣﻴﺰﺍﺗﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﺩﻝ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻊ‬ ‫ﻛﻞ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ‪.Bluetooth‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻋﺒﺮ ‪Bluetooth‬‬ ‫< ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ< ‪.Bluetooth‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ < <‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪.
PAGE 40
‫ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻘﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﻴﺒﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻹﺷﻌﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ )ﺑﺮﻭﺗﻮﻛﻮﻝ ﻧﻘﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﹰﺍ ﻣﻨﺒﺜﻘﹰ ﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎ ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻠﺰﻡ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ LG Android Platform Driver‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﻤﻜﹼﻦ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.
PAGE 41
‫ﺍﳌﻜﺎﳌﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﻠﺐ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﻠﺐ‪ .‬ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺭﻗﻢ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﻹﻧﻬﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ! ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ "‪ "+‬ﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺩﻭﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻤﺎﺀ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎﺀ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺣﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻷﺣﺮﻑ‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﻣﺮﹼﺭ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎﺀ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺑﺠﺪﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ‪.
PAGE 42
‫ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫< ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻭﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻗﻔﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﻭﺿﻌﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺘﻴﻦ ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺟﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﻹﻧﻬﺎﺀ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪ :‬ﺳ ﹸﺘﻔﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺭﺳﻮﻡ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺗﺠﺮﻳﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺳﺠﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺴﺠﻼﺕ‪.
PAGE 43
‫ﺍﻻﺳﻤﺎﺀ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺃﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻭﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺘﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ‪ Google‬ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎﺀ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺳﻢ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎﺀ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﺤﺚ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﻭﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﻭﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻞ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎﺀ < ﺍﺳﻢ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﺽ‪.
PAGE 44
‫ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎﺀ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻤﺎ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻠﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﹰ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﺠﻤﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻟﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮﻯ‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺮﺍﺀ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻴﺎ‬ ‫ﹼ‬ ‫ﺩﺍﻛﻦ ﻭﺗﺘﻢ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎﺀ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ < < ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺭﻧﻴﻦ ﻣﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﻟﻠﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻤﺎ ﻟﻠﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﹰ‬ ‫ﺃﺩ ﹺﺧﻞ ﹰ‬ ‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺅﻫﺎ ﺣﺪﻳﺜﹰﺎ‪.
PAGE 45
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬ ‫ﻳﺠﻤﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻴﺔ ﻭﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺑﺪﻳﻬﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺳﻬﻠﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻤﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ‪ .‬ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﻢ‪ ،‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻠﻢ ﻣﻘﺘﺮﺡ ﻭﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪ :‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﺮﺽ ﺭﺳﻮﻡ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻛﻞ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻧﺼﻴﺔ ﺗﺮﺳﻠﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﺸﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﻭﺍﺑﺪﺃ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪.
PAGE 46
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺎﺩﺛﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺒﺎﺩﻟﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺑﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺯﻣﻨﻲ ﻟﺘﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺭﺅﻳﺔ ﻣﺤﺎﺩﺛﺎﺗﻚ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﹰ ﺎ ﻟﻠﺴﻤﺎﺡ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺈﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻓﻘﹰ ﺎ ﻟﺘﻔﻀﻴﻼﺗﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ < ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.
PAGE 47
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻟﻘﺮﺍﺀﺓ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻮﻓﺮﻱ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ‬ ‫‪ .Gmail‬ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ POP3 :‬ﻭ‪ IMAP‬ﻭ‪Microsoft‬‬ ‫‪) Exchange‬ﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻲ ‪.(Enterprise‬‬ ‫ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‬ ‫ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‬ ‫< ‪.‬‬ ‫<‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﻔﺘﺢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﻔﺘﺢ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺗﻚ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‪.
PAGE 48
‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻭﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻪ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪46‬‬ ‫ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻧ ﹰﺎ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ‪ .‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ‪ ،‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺑﻔﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﻣﻨﻘﻮﻃﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﻘﻞ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﻣﺨﻔﻴﺔ ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﻣﺨﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺳﻤﺎﺀ‪/‬ﻋﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﻭﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻹﺭﻓﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻪ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪.
PAGE 49
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ < < ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪ :‬ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻲ ﺑﻘﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﻣﺼﻨﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻟﻴﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺦ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻭﺍﺿﺤﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ "ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻟﺔ"‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺧﻔﺎﺀ‪/‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ – ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻹﺧﻔﺎﺀ‪/‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ – ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﺈﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.
PAGE 50
‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ – ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺭﻣﺰ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻞ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺳﻮﻯ ﻗﻮﻝ ‪ Cheese‬ﺃﻭ ‪ Smile‬ﺃﻭ ‪ LG‬ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺜﺎﻟﻲ ﺇﻥ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.
PAGE 51
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫< ‪.‬‬ ‫<‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺘﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺑﹼﻊ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻚ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻐﺮﺓ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻄﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻵﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺘﻬﺎ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺷﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.
PAGE 52
‫‪ 5‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﺆﻗ ﹰﺘﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﺠﺪﺩﹰﺍ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﺳﺠﻠﺘﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻐﺮﺓ ﻟﻠﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﹼ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ )ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺃﻭ ‪ (Bluetooth‬ﻟﻠﻤﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ‪.
PAGE 53
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ ﻭﻓﻘﹰ ﺎ ﻟﻠﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜ ﹼﺒﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻣﻴﺰ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﻙ ﺿﻤﻦ ﻣﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‪ ،‬ﺑﺤﻔﻆ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ‪) Download‬ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ( ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﹰ ﻻﺣﺘﻮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻣﻤﺎﺛﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﹰ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ‪) Screenshots‬ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺤﺴﺐ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺋﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻌﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﺑﻤﻞﺀ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .
PAGE 54
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻻﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﻣﺆﻗ ﹰﺘﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻟﻠﺘﻘﺪﻳﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ‪ 10‬ﺛﻮﺍﻧﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻟﻺﺭﺟﺎﻉ ‪ 10‬ﺛﻮﺍﻧﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻟﻘﻔﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﻣﺮﹼﺭ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﻣﺮﹼﺭ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮﻯ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﻣﺮﹼﺭ ﺇﺻﺒﻌﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ )ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﻜﺲ( ﻟﻠﺘﻘﺪﻳﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﺭﺟﺎﻉ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ‪.
PAGE 55
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‬ ‫ﻳﺄﺗﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻣﺰﻭﹼﺩﹰﺍ ﺑﻤﺸﻐﹼﻞ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻳﻤﻜﹼﻨﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻏﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫< ‪.‬‬ ‫<‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 56
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﺰﺝ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ )ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻋﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺰﺝ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻹﺭﺟﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎ ﹰ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻻﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺰﺝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ .
PAGE 57
‫ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻮﻓﺮ ﻟﻚ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻴﺔ ﻭﺳﺎﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺃﻓﻘﻴﺎ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﹰ‬ ‫<‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫< ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻨﺒﻪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﻘﺘﻀﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﻔﻆ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻨﺒﻪ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮﻩ‪.
PAGE 58
‫ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻛﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺑﺪﺀ ﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺭﺓ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﻭﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺳﺒﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻋﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻤﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫< ‪.‬‬ ‫<‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ‪.
PAGE 59
‫‪ 3‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻹﻧﻬﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪ :‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻼﺕ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻟﻠﺒﺤﺚ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ < < ﻣﺠﻠﺪ‪. < Google‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﻗﹸﻞ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺟﺎﺭﹴ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ‪ ...‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺘﺮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪ :‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺎﺩﹰﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪.
PAGE 60
‫ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ ‪FM‬‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ ‪ FM‬ﻣﺪﻣﺠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪ ،‬ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻤﻜﹼﻨﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺤﻄﺎﺗﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫< ‪.‬‬ ‫<‬ ‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ! ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺫﻥ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻛﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪ :‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺎﺩﹰﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪.
PAGE 61
‫ﻣﺘﺼﻔﺢ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺎ ﻭﻣﺘﻨﻮﻋﹰﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻭﺍﻷﺧﺒﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺮﻓﻴﻪ ﻭﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﻋﺎﻟﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﻳﻮﻓﺮ ﻟﻚ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﹰ‬ ‫ﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﻜﺜﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﻛﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﺮﺽ ﺭﺳﻮﻡ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ‪ .‬ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﻤﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺭﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫<‬ ‫<‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﻭﻳﺐ‬ ‫ﻣﺮﹼﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻔﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻟﻠﺘﻘﺪﻡ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 62
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻳﺐ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺘﺮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﹸﻄﻠﺐ ﻣﻨﻚ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .‬ﻗﹸﻞ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪ :‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺎﺩﹰﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻛﺈﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ < ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ < ﺣﻔﻆ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﻭﻳﺐ ﻭﺿﻌﺖ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﺠﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ < ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﺳﺠﻞ ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻤﺖ ﺯﻳﺎﺭﺗﻬﺎ ﻣﺆﺧﺮﹰﺍ‪.
PAGE 63
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻏﺎﻟﺒﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﻟﺘﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻭﺗﻜﻮﻳﻨﻪ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻨﺎﻭﻝ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﻭﺻﻔﹰﺎ‬ ‫ﻟﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ ﺃﻭ ‪-‬‬‫<‬ ‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫< ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ‬ ‫<‬ ‫< ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ‬ ‫> ﺷﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ <‬ ‫‪Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Bluetooth‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪.
PAGE 64
‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻓﺾ ﺑﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ – ﻋﻨﺪ ﺭﻓﺾ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻳﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻣﻔﻴﺪﺍ ﹰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺭﻏﺒﺖ ﻓﻲ ﺭﻓﺾ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﺟﺘﻤﺎﻉ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ – ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﺩ ﺁﻟﻲ – ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺠﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ – ﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻑ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‪.
PAGE 65
‫• ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ – ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ USB‬ﻭﻧﻘﻄﺔ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻟﺔ ﻭﺭﺑﻂ ‪.Bluetooth‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ‬ ‫• ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺣﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﻳﺔ – ﺿﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺷﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ – ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻭﻣﺸﻐﹼﻠﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﻭﺃﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﻭﻏﻴﺮ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫• ‪ – VPN‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺷﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻇﺎﻫﺮﻳﺔ )‪ (VPNs‬ﻭﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﻫﺎ ﻭﺇﺩﺍﺭﺗﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺗﺴﻤﺢ‬ ‫ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﻣﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﺤﻤﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ‬ ‫ﺷﺮﻛﺘﻚ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ‪.
PAGE 66
‫> ﺍﻹﺷﻌﺎﺭﺍﺕ <‬ ‫ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻹﺯﻋﺎﺝ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻹﺷﻌﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ .‬ﻟﻦ ﺗﺰﻋﺠﻚ ﺍﻹﺷﻌﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻹﺷﻌﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻟﻠﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫> ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ <‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ‬ ‫• ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻹﺷﻌﺎﺭﺍﺕ – ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻟﻺﺷﻌﺎﺭ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﹰ‬ ‫ﻟﻺﺷﻌﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ – ﺿﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻴﻬﺘﺰ ﹼ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻭﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻋﻼﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪.
PAGE 67
‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﺎﺩﻳﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ‪.(Android‬‬ ‫• ﺳﻤﺔ – ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺳﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ – ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪ -‬ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻣﺤﻴﻄﺔ ﻟﻠﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺡ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻘﻲ ﻟﻠﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ – ﺿﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﺴﻤﺎﺡ ﺑﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ )ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮﺓ(‪.
PAGE 68
‫> ﺍﻟﺨﻂ <‬ ‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺨﻂ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺨﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺨﻂ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺨﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬ ‫> ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ <‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ‬ ‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﹰ‬ ‫ﻋﻴﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﹰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫ﹼ‬ ‫ﻣﻬﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻠﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫> ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ <‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ‬ ‫• ﺣﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻴﻘﻈﺔ – ﺣﺪﺩ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺳﺎﻛﻨﹰﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ‬ ‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺘﻪ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺷﺤﻨﻪ‪.
PAGE 69
‫• ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻼﻡ ‪ -‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻼﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ‪ -‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻋﻜﺲ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ – ﻋﻜﺲ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻭﺱ ﻟﺘﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻛﺎﻟﺰﺭ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﻴﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺒﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻭﺷﺒﻜﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺳﺆﺍﻟﻚ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺡ ﻟـ ‪Google‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻚ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ – ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻚ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪.
PAGE 70
‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪68‬‬ ‫ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻤﺲ – ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺮ ﺛﻼﺙ ﻣﺮﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﻋﻜﺲ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ – ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻜﺲ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ‪.‬‬‫ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ – ﺿﺒﻂ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬‫ ﺗﺼﻔﻴﺔ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ – ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ‪.‬‬‫ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻳﹸﻨﻬﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ – ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﻧﻬﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻋﺒﺮ‬‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻤﺎﻉ‬ ‫ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺡ – ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﺘﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺡ ﻟﻸﺷﺨﺎﺹ ﺿﻌﻴﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﻊ‪.
PAGE 71
‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻔﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻘﻔﻠﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Google‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ Google‬ﻹﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ‪ Google‬ﻭﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺏ‪.‬‬ ‫> ﺍﻟﺨﺼﻮﺻﻴﺔ <‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ – ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ ﻹﻗﻔﺎﻝ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪.QuickMemo+‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﻄﻠﺐ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ‪.
PAGE 72
‫> ﺍﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ <‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﻀﻴﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﻟﻜﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻭ‪USB‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺮﺍﻗﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ – ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺌﻮﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ – ﺿﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ – ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.
PAGE 73
‫• ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ – ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻌﺔ – ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺸﺮﻛﺔ‬ ‫ﻓﺴﻴﻄﻠﺐ ﻣﻨﻚ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﹼﻌﺔ ﻭﺣﺬﻑ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﻋﺪﺕ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻣﺠﺪﺩﹰﺍ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻧﻔﺴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻣﺘﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ Android‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻭﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﻭﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﻟﻠﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪.
PAGE 74
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ )‪(LG PC Suite‬‬ ‫ﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪Windows‬‬ ‫ﻳﺴﺎﻋﺪﻙ ‪ LG PC Suite‬ﻓﻲ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻭﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺗﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺡ ﻟﻚ‬ ‫ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻔﻀﻞ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ ،LG PC Suite‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‪...‬‬ ‫• ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ )ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‪ ،‬ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ( ﻭﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ )ﺍﻟﺠﺪﺍﻭﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎﺀ‪ ،‬ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ( ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.
PAGE 75
‫ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪LG PC Suite‬‬ ‫• ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ :‬ﺑﺖ ‪،Windows Vista ،Windows XP (Service pack 3)32‬‬ ‫‪Windows 8 ،Windows 7‬‬ ‫• ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰﻳﺔ )‪ :(CPU‬ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺎﺕ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ‪ 1‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎﻫﺮﺗﺰ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ :‬ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ ﻋﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ )‪ (RAM‬ﺑﺴﻌﺔ ‪ 512‬ﻣﻴﻐﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫• ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ :‬ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺎﻧﺔ ‪ ،768 x 1024‬ﻭﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ‪ 32‬ﺑﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫• ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ‪ :‬ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺧﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ ﺗﺒﻠﻎ ‪ 500‬ﻣﻴﻐﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ )ﻗﺪ ﻳﻠﺰﻡ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺧﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ ﺑﻨﺎ ﹰﺀ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻧﺔ‪(.
PAGE 76
‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪LG PC Suite‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ ،LG PC Suite‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.www.lg.com‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺪﻋﻢ < ﺩﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ < ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﺍﺯ ﻭﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﻣﺮﹼﺭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ < ‪ < Mac OS‬ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﻟﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪.LG PC Suite‬‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪LG PC Suite‬‬ ‫• ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ (10.6.
PAGE 77
‫ﲢﺪﻳﺚ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻝ ‪ LG‬ﻣﻦ ﺇﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‬ ‫ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺯﻳﺎﺭﺓ‬ ‫‪ http://www.lg.com/common/index.jsp‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﺪ ﻭﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺑﺄﺣﺪﺙ ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻣﻦ ﺩﻭﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺯﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪ .‬ﺳﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺼﺪﺭ ‪ LG‬ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ‬ ‫ﺃﺣﺪﺙ ﻟﻠﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪.
PAGE 78
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪ :‬ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻮﻓﺮ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻠﺪ‪.
PAGE 79
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ‬ ‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪ ،‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﻗﺮﺍﺀﺓ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺑﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻀﻤﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﺄﻣﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﻭﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺋﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺰﻭﺩﻩ ﻣﻮﻓﺮﻭ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺷﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ‪ .‬ﻳﺨﻀﻊ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺣﺪﺙ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺯﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻭﻳﺐ ‪ LG‬ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.www.lg.
PAGE 80
‫ﺍﳌﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪) .‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪(.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﺮ‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬ ‫ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺍﺳﺘﻴﺮﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﻛﻴﺒﻞ ‪USB‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎ ﻣﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ‪ LG‬ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﻢ ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻭﻗﺪ‬ ‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﹰ‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻭﺃﻱ ﻣﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﺑﺤﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪.
PAGE 81
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﻄﺎﺀ ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻳﺴﺮﺩ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺼﺎﺩﻓﻬﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻛﻞ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﻣﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻤﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻣﻌﻈﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﺳﻬﻠﺔ ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺤﻬﺎ ﺑﻨﻔﺴﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺳﺒﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﺧﻄﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫‪ SIM‬ﺃﻭ ‪USIM‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SIM‬ﺃﻭ‬ ‫‪ USIM‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺭﺑﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﺗﻢ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SIM‬ﺃﻭ ‪ USIM‬ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺿﻌﻴﻔﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻧﻚ‬ ‫ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﻣﺰﻭﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮ ﹼﺟﻪ ﻧﺤﻮ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻧﺤﻮ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻣﻔﺘﻮﺡ‪ .
PAGE 82
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻌﺬ ﹼﺭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫ﺧﻄﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬ ‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﻤﻮﺡ‬ ‫ﺑﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪80‬‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺳﺒﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺍﺑﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻨﺔ‬ ‫ﺧﻄﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻄﻠﺐ‬ ‫ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺼﺮﹼﺡ ﻟﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻢ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SIM‬ﺃﻭ‬ ‫‪ USIM‬ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻓﻮﻉ ﻣﻘﺪ ﹰﻣﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﻤﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ‬ ‫‪.PIN2‬‬ ‫ﺗﻢ ﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻟﺒﺮﻫﺔ ﻗﺼﻴﺮﺓ ﺟ ﹰﺪﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ‪.
PAGE 83
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺳﺒﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺍﺑﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻨﺔ‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻼﻡ‬ ‫‪ /‬ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬ ‫‪ SMS‬ﻭﺻﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﻤﺘﻠﺌﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺣﺬﻑ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻻ ﺗﻔﺘﺢ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺪﻋﻮﻡ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺃﺗﻠﻘﻰ‬ ‫ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺸﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﺷﻴﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻳﺒﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻗﻴﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﺒﺔ ﻭﺍﻗﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻣﺖ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺷﺮﻳﻄﺎ ﹰ‬ ‫ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﻐﻄﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﺸﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﺷﻴﺎﺀ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻳﺒﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﺸﻌﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺷﻴﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﻧﻈﻴﻔﺔ‪.
PAGE 84
‫ﺍﻷﺳﺌﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺋﻌﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ‬ ‫‪Bluetooth‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﺆﺍﻝ‬ ‫ﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻋﺒﺮ‬ ‫‪Bluetooth‬؟‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻲ ﻛﻴﻒ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻨﻲ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻧﺴﺦ‬ ‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻲ ﻟﻸﺳﻤﺎﺀ؟‬ ‫ﻟﻸﺳﻤﺎﺀ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺻﻮﺕ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﻣﺜﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻴﺮﻳﻮ‪/‬ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﹺﻋ ﹼﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻭﺣﺴﺎﺏ‬ ‫‪.Google‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ‬ ‫ﻫﻞ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻣﻊ ‪Gmail‬؟‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺛﻨﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻫﻲ ﻭﺣﺪﻫﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ‪.
PAGE 85
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﺆﺍﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺍﺏ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺰﺍﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﻫﻞ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﻛﻞ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻲ؟‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺃﺳﻤﺎﺀ ‪ Gmail‬ﻭﺧﺎﺩﻡ ‪MS Exchange‬‬ ‫)ﺧﺎﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻟﻠﺸﺮﻛﺔ( ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻤﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻧﻘﻠﺖ ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻦ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ‪ .‬ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻛﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻣﺠﺪﺩﹰﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻫﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻦ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﻊ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.
PAGE 86
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﺆﺍﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺍﺏ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻧﺴﻴﺖ ﻧﻘﺶ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ‪ Google‬ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻓﺸﻠﺖ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺶ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ‪5‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﻄﻠﺐ‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻫﻞ ﻧﺴﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺶ؟‪ .‬ﹸ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻚ ﺑﻌﺪﻫﺎ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ‪Google‬‬ ‫ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻨﺸﺊ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻲ ﺃﻥ ﺃﻓﻌﻞ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻧﺴﻴﺖ‬ ‫ﻣﺎﺫﺍ ﹼ‬ ‫ﻧﻘﺶ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ ﻧﻘﺶ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ ﻭﻟﻢ ﺃﻧﺸﺊ‬ ‫‪ Google‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺃﻭ ﻧﺴﻴﺘﻪ‪ ،‬ﻓﻌﻠﻴﻚ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ‪ Google‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ؟ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‪.
PAGE 87
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻬﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﺆﺍﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺍﺏ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺷﺎﺷﺘﻲ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ‪15‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ < ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ‬ ‫ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﻛﻴﻒ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻨﻲ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻬﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ؟‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ‬ ‫‪ .4‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﹼ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.
PAGE 88
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﺆﺍﻝ‬ ‫ﻧﻌﻢ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻛﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﺭﻧﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻛﻤﻨﺒﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺃﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﺒﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻔﺘﺢ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﺭﻧﻴﻦ‬ ‫< ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺭﻧﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺭﻧﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﻪ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻛﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﺭﻧﻴﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨ ﹼﺒﻪ‬ ‫ﻫﻞ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻨﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﻪ؟‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨ ﹼﺒﻪ‬ ‫ﻫﻞ ﺳﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻨ ﹼﺒﻪ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﻤﻮﻋﹰﺎ ﺃﻡ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺳﻴﺨﺘﻔﻲ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﻻ‪ ،‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺪﻋﻮﻡ‪.
PAGE 89
User Guide • • • • • ENGLISH Some content and illustrations may differ from your device depending on the region, service provider, software version, or OS version, and are subject to change without prior notice. Always use genuine LG accessories. The supplied items are designed only for this device and may not be compatible with other devices. This device is not suitable for people who have a visual impairment due to the touchscreen keyboard. Copyright ©2016 LG Electronics, Inc. All rights reserved.
PAGE 90
Table of contents Guidelines for safe and efﬁcient use .......4 Important notice .....................................13 Getting to know your phone ...................16 Phone layout..........................................16 Installing the SIM or USIM card and battery...................................................18 Charging the battery ..............................20 Inserting a memory card ........................21 Removing the memory card ...................22 Locking and unlocking the device ...
PAGE 91
Camera and Video...................................48 Camera options on the viewﬁnder ..........48 Using the advanced settings ..................49 Taking a photo .......................................50 Once you have taken a photo .................50 Recording a video ..................................51 After recording a video...........................51 Gallery ...................................................52 Multimedia ..............................................55 Music .......................
PAGE 92
Guidelines for safe and efﬁcient use Please read these simple guidelines. Not following these guidelines may be dangerous or illegal. Should a fault occur, a software tool is built into your device that will gather a fault log. This tool gathers only data specific to the fault, such as signal strength, cell ID position in sudden call drop and applications loaded. The log is used only to help determine the cause of the fault.
PAGE 93
• This device meets RF exposure guidelines when used either in the normal use position against the ear or when positioned at least 1.5 cm away from the body. When a carry case, belt clip or holder is used for body-worn operation, it should not contain metal and should position the product at least 1.5 cm away from your body. In order to transmit data files or messages, this device requires a quality connection to the network.
PAGE 94
• • • • • • • • • • • • • 6 Do not charge a handset near flammable material as the handset can become hot and create a fire hazard. Use a dry cloth to clean the exterior of the unit (do not use solvents such as benzene, thinner or alcohol). Do not charge the phone when it is on soft furnishings. The phone should be charged in a well ventilated area. Do not subject this unit to excessive smoke or dust.
PAGE 95
Efficient phone operation Electronics devices All mobile phones may receive interference, which could affect performance. • Do not use your mobile phone near medical equipment without requesting permission. Avoid placing the phone over pacemakers, for example, in your breast pocket. • Some hearing aids might be disturbed by mobile phones. • Minor interference may affect TVs, radios, PCs etc. • Use your phone in temperatures between 0 ºC and 40 ºC, if possible.
PAGE 96
Avoid damage to your hearing To prevent possible hearing damage, do not listen at high volume levels for long periods. Damage to your hearing can occur if you are exposed to loud sound for long periods of time. We therefore recommend that you do not turn on or off the handset close to your ear. We also recommend that music and call volumes are set to a reasonable level.
PAGE 97
Potentially explosive atmospheres • • • Do not use your phone at a refueling point. Do not use near fuel or chemicals. Do not transport or store flammable gas, liquid or explosives in the same compartment of your vehicle as your mobile phone or accessories. In aircraft Wireless devices can cause interference in aircraft. • Turn your mobile phone off before boarding any aircraft. • Do not use it on the ground without permission from the crew.
PAGE 98
Battery information and care • • • • • • • • • • • • • 10 You do not need to completely discharge the battery before recharging. Unlike other battery systems, there is no memory effect that could compromise the battery's performance. Use only LG batteries and chargers. LG chargers are designed to maximise the battery life. Do not disassemble or short-circuit the battery. Keep the metal contacts of the battery clean. Replace the battery when it no longer provides acceptable performance.
PAGE 99
Open Source Software Notice Information To obtain the source code under GPL, LGPL, MPL, and other open source licenses, that is contained in this product, please visit http://opensource.lge.com. In addition to the source code, all referred license terms, warranty disclaimers and copyright notices are available for download.
PAGE 100
Disposal of your old appliance 1 All electrical and electronic products should be disposed of separately from the municipal waste stream via designated collection facilities appointed by the government or the local authorities. 2 The correct disposal of your old appliance will help prevent potential negative consequences for the environment and human health.
PAGE 101
Important notice Please read this before you start using your phone! Please check to see whether any problems you encountered with your phone are described in this section before taking the phone in for service or calling a service representative. 1. Phone memory When there is less than 10MB of space available in your phone memory, your phone cannot receive new messages. You may need to check your phone memory and delete some data, such as applications or messages, to make more memory available.
PAGE 102
• • Some applications you download may consume battery power. While using downloaded applications, check the battery charge level. 3. Before installing an open source application and OS WARNING If you install and use an OS other than the one provided by the manufacturer it may cause your phone to malfunction. In addition, your phone will no longer be covered by the warranty. WARNING To protect your phone and personal data, only download applications from trusted sources, such as Play Store™.
PAGE 103
5. When the screen freezes If the screen freezes or the phone does not respond when you try to operate it, remove the battery and reinsert it. Then power the phone back on.
PAGE 104
Getting to know your phone Phone layout Microphone Headset Jack Proximity Sensor Earpiece Front Camera Lens NOTE: Proximity Sensor When receiving and making calls, the proximity sensor automatically turns the backlight off and locks the touch screen by sensing when the phone is near your ear. This extends battery life and prevents you from unintentionally activating the touch screen during calls.
PAGE 105
Rear Camera Lens Flash Power/Lock Button Volume Buttons Speaker Charger/USB port Power/Lock Button Volume Buttons • • Microphone Turn your phone on/off by pressing and holding this button Short press to lock/unlock the screen (While screen is off) • Long Press Up to launch Capture+ • Long Press Down to launch Camera Getting to know your phone 17
PAGE 106
Installing the SIM or USIM card and battery Insert the SIM or USIM card provided by the mobile telephone service provider, and the included battery. 1 To remove the back cover, hold the phone firmly in one hand. With your other hand, lift off the back cover with your thumbnail as shown in the figure below. 2 Slide the SIM card into the SIM card slot as shown in the figure. Make sure the gold contact area on the card is facing downward.
PAGE 107
WARNING Do not insert a memory card into the SIM card slot. If a memory card happens to be lodged in the SIM card slot, take the device to a LG Service Centre to remove the memory card. NOTE: Only the microSIM cards work with the device. 3 Insert the battery. 4 To replace the cover onto the device, align the back cover over the battery compartment and press it down until it clicks into place .
PAGE 108
Charging the battery Charge the battery before using it for first time. Use the charger to charge the battery. A computer can also be used to charge the battery by connecting the phone to it using the USB cable. WARNING Use only LG-approved chargers, batteries and cables. If you use unapproved chargers, batteries or cables, it may cause battery charging delay. Or this can cause the battery to explode or damage the device, which are not covered by the warranty.
PAGE 109
Inserting a memory card Your device supports up to a 32GB microSD card. Depending on the memory card manufacturer and type, some memory cards may not be compatible with your device. WARNING Some memory cards may not be fully compatible with the device. Using an incompatible card may damage the device or the memory card, or corrupt the data stored in it. NOTE: • Frequent writing and erasing of data shortens the lifespan of memory cards. 1 Remove the back cover.
PAGE 110
Removing the memory card Before removing the memory card, first unmount it for safe removal. 1 Tap > > > General tab > Storage & USB > . 2 Remove the back cover and pull out the memory card. WARNING Do not remove the memory card while the device is transferring or accessing information. Doing so can cause data to be lost or corrupted or damage to the memory card or device. It is not responsible for losses that result from the misuse of damaged memory cards, including the loss of data.
PAGE 111
NOTE: Create a Google account before setting an unlock pattern and remember the Backup PIN you created when creating your pattern lock. TIP! Smart Lock You can use Smart Lock to make unlocking your phone easier. You can set it to keep your phone unlocked when you have a trusted Bluetooth device connected to it, when it's in a familiar location like your home or work, or when it recognises your face. Setting up Smart Lock 1 Tap > > . 2 Tap Display tab > Lock screen > Smart Lock.
PAGE 112
Your Home screen Touch screen tips Here are some tips on how to navigate on your phone. • Tap or touch – A single finger tap selects items, links, shortcuts and letters on the on-screen keyboard. • Touch and hold – Touch and hold an item on the screen by tapping it and not lifting your finger until an action occurs. • Drag – Touch and hold an item for a moment and then, without lifting your finger, move your finger on the screen until you reach the target position.
PAGE 113
Home screen The Home screen is the starting point for many applications and functions. It allows you to add items like app shortcuts and Google widgets to give you instant access to information and applications. This is the default canvas and accessible from any menu by tapping . Status Bar Application Icons Location Indicator Quick Key Area Home Touch Keys Shows the phone's status information, including the time, signal strength, battery status and notification icons.
PAGE 114
Extended Home screen The operating system provides multiple Home screen canvases to provide more space for adding icons, widgets and more. • Slide your finger left or right across the Home screen to access additional canvases. Customizing the Home screen You can customize your Home screen by adding apps and widgets and changing wallpapers. Adding items on your Home screen 1 Touch and hold the empty part of the Home screen. 2 In the Add Mode menu, select the item you want to add.
PAGE 115
NOTE: The Apps key cannot be removed. Customizing app icons on the Home screen 1 Touch and hold an application icon until it unlocks from its current position, then release it. The editing icon appears in the upper-right corner of the application. 2 Tap the application icon again and select the desired icon design and size. 3 Tap OK to save the change. Returning to recently-used applications 1 Tap . App previews of recently used applications will be displayed.
PAGE 116
Pending notifications System notifications Opening the notifications panel Swipe down from the status bar to open the notifications panel. To close the notifications panel, swipe the screen upwards or tap . Quick Settings Area Notifications CLEAR Tap each quick setting key to toggle it on/off. Touch and hold the desired key to directly access the settings menu for the function. To see more toggle keys, swipe left or right. Tap to remove, add or rearrange quick setting keys.
PAGE 117
Indicator icons on the Status Bar Indicator icons appear on the status bar at the top of the screen to report missed calls, new messages, calendar events, device status and more. The icons displayed at the top of the screen provide information about the status of the device. The icons listed in the table below are some of the most common ones.
PAGE 118
NOTE: The icon's location in the status bar may differ according to the function or service. On-screen keyboard You can enter text using the on-screen keyboard. The on-screen keyboard appears on the screen when you tap an available text entry field. Using the keypad and entering text Tap once to capitalize the next letter you type. Double-tap for all caps. Tap to go to the keyboard settings. Touch and hold to enter text by voice or access the clip tray. Tap to enter a space. Tap to create a new line.
PAGE 119
Special Features Gesture shot The Gesture shot feature allows you to take a picture with a hand gesture using the front camera. To take photo There are two methods for using the Gesture shot feature. • Raise your hand, with an open palm, until the front camera detects it and a box appears on the screen. Then close your hand into a fist to start the timer, allowing you time to get ready. • Raise your hand, in a clenched fist, until the front camera detects it and a box appears on the screen.
PAGE 120
KnockON The KnockON feature allows you to double-tap the screen to easily turn it on or off. To turn the screen on 1 Double-tap the center of the Lock screen to turn the screen on. 2 Unlock the screen or access any of the available shortcuts or widgets. To turn the screen off 1 Double-tap an empty area of the Home screen or the Status Bar. 2 The screen will turn off. NOTE: Tap on the center area of the screen. If you tap on the bottom or the top area, the recognition rate may decrease.
PAGE 121
Unlocking the screen using the Knock Code You can unlock the screen by tapping the Knock Code pattern you already set, when the screen turns off. Capture+ The Capture+ feature allows you to create memos and capture screen shots. You can use Capture+ to easily and efficiently create memos during a call, with a saved picture or on the current phone screen. 1 Tap and drag the Status Bar down and tap . 2 Create a memo using the following options: Tap to undo the most recent action.
PAGE 122
NOTE: Please use a fingertip while using the Capture+ feature. Do not use your fingernail. 3 Tap > Done to save the current memo to or . Discard Capture+: • Tap . View the Saved Memo Tap > > and select the Capture+ album or tap memo.
PAGE 123
Google account setup The first time you open a Google application on your phone, you will be required to sign in with your existing Google account. If you do not have a Google account, you will be prompted to create one. Creating your Google account 1 Tap > . 2 Tap > General tab > Accounts & sync > ADD ACCOUNT > Google > Or create a new account. 3 Follow the on-screen instructions to complete the account setup. Signing into your Google account 1 2 3 4 5 Tap > .
PAGE 124
Connecting to Networks and Devices Wi-Fi You can use high-speed Internet access while within the coverage of the wireless access point (AP). Connecting to Wi-Fi networks 1 Tap > > > Networks tab > Wi-Fi. 2 Tap to turn Wi-Fi on and start scanning for available Wi-Fi networks. 3 Tap a network to connect to it. • If the network is secured with a lock icon, you will need to enter a security key or password. 4 The status bar displays icons that indicate Wi-Fi status.
PAGE 125
Bluetooth Bluetooth is a short-range communications technology that allows you to connect wirelessly to a number of Bluetooth devices, such as headsets and hands-free car kits, and Bluetooth-enabled handhelds, computers, printers, and wireless devices. NOTE: • LG is not responsible for the loss, interception or misuse of data sent or received via the Bluetooth feature. • Always make sure that you share and receive data with devices that are trusted and properly secured.
PAGE 126
Sending data via Bluetooth 1 Select a file or item such as a contact or media file. 2 Select the option for sending data via Bluetooth. 3 Search for and pair with a Bluetooth-enabled device. • Due to different specifications and features of other Bluetooth-compatible devices, display and operations may be different, and functions such as transfer or exchange may not be possible with all Bluetooth compatible devices. Receiving data via Bluetooth 1 Tap > > > Networks tab > Bluetooth.
PAGE 127
Transferring data between a PC and the device You can copy or move data between a PC and the device. Transferring data 1 Connect your device to a PC using the USB cable that came with your phone. 2 Open the Notifications panel, tap the current connection type, and select Media device (MTP). 3 A window will pop-up on your PC, allowing you to transfer the desired data. NOTE: • The LG Android Platform Driver is required to be installed on your PC to be able to detect the phone.
PAGE 128
Calls Making a call 1 2 3 4 Tap to open the dialer. Enter the number using the dialer. To delete a digit, tap . After entering the desired number, tap to place the call. To end the call, tap . TIP! To enter "+" to make international calls, touch and hold . Calling your contacts 1 Tap to open your contacts. 2 Scroll through the contact list. You can also enter the contact's name in the Search field or scroll along the alphabet letters on the right edge of the screen.
PAGE 129
Making a second call 1 2 3 4 During your first call, tap > Add call and enter the number. Tap to place the call. Both calls are displayed on the call screen. Your initial call is locked and put on hold. Tap the displayed number to toggle between calls. Or tap to start a conference call. 5 To end all calls, tap . NOTE: You are charged for each call you make. Viewing your call logs On the Home screen, tap and select Call logs. View a list of all dialed, received and missed calls.
PAGE 130
Contacts You can add contacts on your phone and synchronize them with the contacts in your Google Account or other accounts that support syncing contacts. Searching for a contact 1 Tap to open your contacts. 2 Tap Search contacts and enter the contact name using the keyboard. Adding a new contact 1 Tap and enter the new contact's number. Tap the Create contact field, or Add to Contacts > New contact. 2 If you want to add a picture to the new contact, tap the image area.
PAGE 131
Removing a contact from your favourites list 1 Tap to open your contacts. 2 Tap the Favourites tab, and choose a contact to view its details. 3 Tap the yellow star at the top right of the screen. The star turns a dark color and the contact is removed from your favourites. Creating a group 1 Tap to open your contacts. 2 Tap Groups > > New group. 3 Enter a name for the new group. You can also set a distinct ringtone for the newly created group. 4 Tap Add members to add contacts to the group.
PAGE 132
Messaging Your phone combines text and multimedia messaging into one intuitive, easyto-use menu. Sending a message 1 Tap on the Home screen and tap to create a new message. 2 Enter a contact name or contact number into the To field. As you enter the contact name, matching contacts appear. You can tap a suggested recipient and add more than one contact. NOTE: You may be charged for each text message you send. Please consult with your service provider. 3 Tap the text field and start entering your message.
PAGE 133
Conversation view Messages exchanged with another party are displayed in chronological order so that you can conveniently see and find your conversations. Changing your messaging settings Your phone's messaging settings are predefined to allow you to send messages immediately. You can change the settings based on your preferences. • Tap on the Home screen, tap > Settings.
PAGE 134
E-mail You can use the Email application to read email from providers other than Gmail. The Email application supports the following account types: POP3, IMAP and Microsoft Exchange (for Enterprise users). Managing email accounts To open the Email application Tap > > . The first time you open the Email application, a setup wizard opens to help you add an email account. Adding another email account: • Tap > > > > Settings > Add account.
PAGE 135
Composing and sending email 1 In the application, tap to create a new email. 2 Enter an address for the message's intended recipient. As you enter text, matching addresses will be offered from your contacts. Separate multiple addresses with semicolons. 3 Tap the Cc/Bcc field to copy or blind copy to other contacts/email addresses. 4 Tap the text field and enter your message. 5 Tap to attach the file you want to send with your message. 6 Tap to send the message.
PAGE 136
Camera and Video Camera options on the viewfinder To open the Camera application, tap > > . You can use the camera or camcorder to take and share pictures and videos. NOTE: Be sure to clean the protective lens cover with a microfiber cloth before taking pictures. A lens cover with smudges from fingers can cause blurry pictures with a "halo" effect. Hide/Display Options – Tap to hide/display the camera options on the viewfinder. Flash – Allows you to manage the camera's flash.
PAGE 137
Capture – Tap to take a photo. Back Key – Tap to exit the camera. Using the advanced settings In the camera viewfinder, tap to show the advanced options. Tap each icon to adjust the following camera settings. Set the size of your picture and video. Allows you to take pictures with voice commands. When on, you just say "Cheese", "Smile", "LG", etc. to take a picture. Set your camera's timer. This is ideal if you want to be a part of the picture or video.
PAGE 138
Taking a photo 1 2 3 4 Tap > > . Frame your subject on the screen. A square around the subject indicates that the camera has focused. Tap to take a photo. Your picture will be automatically saved to the Gallery. Once you have taken a photo Tap the image thumbnail on the screen to view the last photo you took. Tap to edit the photo. Tap to take another photo immediately. Tap to send your photo to others or share it via any available social network services. Tap to delete the photo.
PAGE 139
Recording a video 1 2 3 4 Tap > > . Frame your subject on the screen. Tap to start recording the video. The length of the recording is displayed on the top of the screen. NOTE: Tap 5 Tap OR Tap to take pictures while recording video. to pause recording video. You can resume recording again by tapping . to stop recording. Your video will be automatically saved to the Gallery. After recording a video Tap the video thumbnail on the screen to view the last video you recorded.
PAGE 140
Gallery The Gallery application presents the pictures and videos in your storage, including those you've taken with the Camera application and those you downloaded from the web or other locations. 1 Tap > > to view the images stored in the storage. 2 Tap an album to open it and view its contents. (The pictures and videos in the album are displayed in chronological order.) 3 Tap a picture in an album to view it. NOTE: • Depending on the software installed, some file formats may not be supported.
PAGE 141
Video options 1 Tap > > . 2 Select the video you want to watch. Tap to pause/resume video playback. Tap to fast-forward 10 seconds. Tap to rewind 10 seconds. Tap to adjust video volume. Tap to lock/unlock the screen. Tap to access additional options. NOTE: • While a video is playing, slide the right side of the screen up or down to adjust the sound. • While a video is playing, slide the left side of the screen up or down to adjust the brightness.
PAGE 142
Editing photos While viewing a photo, tap . Deleting photos/videos Use one of the following methods: • While in a folder, tap , select the photos/videos and then tap DELETE. • While viewing a photo, tap . Setting wallpaper While viewing a photo, tap it to a contact. > Set image as to set the image as wallpaper or assign NOTE: • Depending on the software installed, some file formats may not be supported. • If the file size exceeds the available memory, an error can occur when you open files.
PAGE 143
Multimedia Music Your phone has a music player that lets you play all your favorite tracks. Playing a song 1 Tap > > . 2 Tap the Songs tab. 3 Select the song you want to play. 4 The following options are available. Tap to add the song to your favourites. Tap to open the current playlist. Tap to access additional options.
PAGE 144
Tap to play the current playlist in shuffle mode (tracks are played in random order). Tap to toggle through repeat all songs, repeat current song and repeat off. Tap to adjust the volume. Tap to restart the current track or skip to the previous track in the album, playlist or shuffle list. Touch and hold to rewind. Tap to pause playback. Tap to resume playback. Tap to skip to the next track in the album, playlist or shuffle list. Touch and hold to fast-forward. Tap to open the music library.
PAGE 145
Utilities Clock The Clock app gives you access to the Alarms, Timer, World clock and Stopwatch functions. Access these functions by tapping the tabs across the top of the screen or swiping horizontally across the screen. > > . Tap Alarms The Alarms tab allows you to set alarms. 1 Open the app, then select the Alarm tab. 2 Tap to add a new alarm. 3 Adjust the settings as necessary and tap SAVE. NOTE: You can also tap an existing alarm to edit it.
PAGE 146
Stopwatch The Stopwatch tab allows you to use your phone as a stopwatch. 1 Open the app, then select the Stopwatch tab. 2 Tap the Start key to initiate the stopwatch. • Tap the Lap key to record lap times. 3 Tap the Stop button to stop stopwatch. Calculator The Calculator app allows you to perform mathematical calculations using a standard or scientific calculator. 1 Tap > > . 2 Tap the number keys to enter numbers.
PAGE 147
Voice Recorder The Voice Recorder app records audible files for you to use in a variety of ways. Recording a sound or voice 1 Tap > > . 2 Tap to begin recording. 3 Tap to end the recording. 4 Tap to listen to the recording. NOTE: Tap recordings. to access your recordings. You can listen to your saved Voice Search Use this application to search webpages using voice. 1 Tap > > Google folder > . 2 Say a keyword or phrase when Listening... appears on the screen.
PAGE 148
FM Radio Your phone has a built-in FM radio so you can tune in to your favorite stations and listen on the go. > > . Tap TIP! You must plug in your earphones in order to use them as an antenna. NOTE: This application may not be available depending on the region or service provider.
PAGE 149
Web Browser Internet The internet gives you a fast, full-color world of games, music, news, sports, entertainment, and much more, right on your mobile phone. NOTE: Additional charges apply when connecting to these services and downloading content. Check data charges with your network provider. 1 Tap > > . Using the Web toolbar Scroll towards the top of the webpage to access the browser toolbar. Tap to go back one page. Tap to go forward one page. Tap to go to the Home page. Tap to open a new window.
PAGE 150
Searching the web by voice Tap the address field and then tap . When prompted, say a keyword and select one of the suggested keywords that appear. NOTE: This feature may not be available depending on the region or service provider. Bookmarks To bookmark the current webpage, tap > Add bookmark > SAVE. To open a bookmarked webpage, tap and select the desired bookmark. History Tap > History tab to open a list of recently visited webpages. To clear all of your history, tap > YES.
PAGE 151
Settings The Settings application contains most of the tools for customizing and configuring your phone. All of the settings in the Settings application are described in this section. To open the Settings application • Tap > touch and hold > System settings. - or • Tap > > . Networks < WIRELESS NETWORKS > Wi-Fi Turns on Wi-Fi to connect to available Wi-Fi networks. Bluetooth Turns the Bluetooth wireless feature on or off to use Bluetooth. Mobile data Displays the data usage and mobile data usage limit.
PAGE 152
• • • • • • • • • • Decline with message – When you want to reject a call, you can send a quick message using this function. This is useful if you need to reject a call during a meeting. Call forwarding – Allows you to set the call forwarding options. Auto answer – Sets the time before a connected hands-free device automatically answers an incoming call. Connection vibration – Vibrates your phone when the other party answers the call.
PAGE 153
Wi-Fi hotspot – You can also use your phone to provide a mobile broadband connection. Create a hotspot and share your connection. • Bluetooth tethering – Allows you to connect other devices to your phone via Bluetooth and share its internet connection. • Help – Displays information regarding USB tethering, Wi-Fi hotspot, and Bluetooth tethering. More • Airplane mode – Checkmark to turn off all wireless connections and calls.
PAGE 154
Vibration type Allows you to set a vibration type for notifications. < NOTIFICATIONS > Do not disturb Tap to set notifications. You can have no interruptions from notifications. Lock screen Allows you to show all notifications on the Lock screen. Apps Allows you to set notifications for apps. < ADVANCED SETTINGS > More • Notification sound – Allows you to set the notification sound. You can also add and delete notification sounds.
PAGE 155
Android navigation). Theme - Sets the screen theme for your device. • Wallpaper – Sets the wallpaper to use on your Home screen. • Screen swipe effect – Choose the desired type of effect to display when you swipe from one Home screen canvas to the next. • Allow Home screen looping – Checkmark to allow continuous Home screen scrolling (loop back to first screen after last screen). • Help – Tap to get information on using the Home screen of your device.
PAGE 156
< FONT > Font type Select the desired font type. Font size Select the desired font size. < BASIC SETTINGS > Brightness Adjust the screen brightness by using the slider. Auto-rotate screen Set to switch orientation automatically when you rotate the phone. Screen timeout Set the time delay before the screen automatically turns off. < ADVANCED SETTINGS > More • Daydream – Select the screensaver to display when the phone is sleeping while docked and/or charging.
PAGE 157
Text-to-speech output – Tap to set the preferred engine or general settings for text-to-speech output. • Pointer speed – Adjust the pointer speed. • Reverse buttons – Reverse the mouse buttons to use primary button on right. Location Turn on location service, your phone determines your approximate location using Wi-Fi and mobile networks. When you select this option, you're asked whether you consent to allowing Google to use your location when providing these services.
PAGE 158
• • • • • 70 - Touch zoom – Allows you to zoom in and out by triple-tapping the screen. - Screen colour inversion – Enable to invert the colours of the screen and content. - Screen colour adjustment – Adjust the display colour. - Screen colour filter – Allows you to change the colours of screen and content. - Power key ends call – Enable so that you can end voice calls by pressing the Power/Lock Key. Hearing - Captions – Allows you to customize caption settings for those with hearing impairments.
PAGE 159
Shortcut key Get quick access to apps by pressing and holding the Volume Buttons when the screen is off or locked. Google Use Google Settings to manage your Google apps and account settings. < PRIVACY > Security Use the Security menu to configure how to help secure your phone and its data. • Content lock – Select lock types to lock files for QuickMemo+. • Encrypt phone – Allows you to encrypt data on the phone for security.
PAGE 160
< PHONE MANAGEMENT > Date & time Set your preferences for how the date and time is displayed. Storage & USB You can monitor the used and available internal memory in the device. Battery & power saving • Battery usage – View battery usage. • Battery percentage on status bar – Checkmark to display the battery level percentage on the Status Bar next to the Battery icon. • Battery saver – Tap the Battery Saver switch to toggle it on or off.
PAGE 161
Automatic restore – When reinstalling an app, restore backed up settings and data. • Network settings reset – Reset all network settings. • Factory data reset – Reset your settings to the factory default values and delete all your data. If you reset the phone this way, you are prompted to re-enter the same information as when you first started Android. About phone View legal information, check phone status and software versions, and perform a software update.
PAGE 162
PC software (LG PC Suite) For Windows OS LG PC Suite helps you manage media contents and applications in your phone by allowing you to connect to your phone to your PC. With the LG PC Suite software, you can... • Manage and play your media contents (music, movie, pictures) on your PC. • Send multimedia contents to your device. • Synchronizes data (schedules, contacts, bookmarks) in your device and PC. • Backup the applications in your device. • Update the software in your device.
PAGE 163
System Requirements for LG PC Suite software • OS: Windows XP (Service pack 3) 32 bit, Windows Vista, Windows 7, Windows 8 • CPU: 1 GHz or higher processors • Memory: 512 MB or higher RAMs • Graphic card: 1024 x 768 resolution, 32 bit color or higher • HDD: 500 MB or more free hard disk space (More free hard disk space may be needed depending on the volume of data stored.) • Required software: LG United drivers, Windows Media Player 10 or later.
PAGE 164
Installing the LG PC Suite Software To download the LG PC Suite software, please do the following: 1 Go to www.lg.com. 2 Go to SUPPORT > MOBILE SUPPORT > PC Sync. 3 Select the model information and click GO. 4 Scroll down, select the PC SYNC tab > Mac OS > DOWNLOAD to download LG PC Suite. System Requirements for LG PC Suite software • OS: Mac OS X (10.6.
PAGE 165
Phone software update Phone software update LG Mobile phone software update from the Internet For more information about using this function, please visit http://www.lg.com/common/ index.jsp select your country and language. This feature allows you to conveniently update the firmware on your phone to a newer version from the Internet without needing to visit a service center. This feature will only be available if and when LG makes a newer firmware version available for your device.
PAGE 166
NOTE: Your personal data from internal phone storage—including information about your Google account and any other accounts, your system/application data and settings, any downloaded applications and your DRM licence— might be lost in the process of updating your phone's software. Therefore, LG recommends that you backup your personal data before updating your phone's software. LG does not take responsibility for any loss of personal data.
PAGE 167
About this user guide About this user guide • • • • • • • Before using your device, please carefully read this guide. This ensures that you use your phone safely and correctly. Some of the images and screenshots provided in this guide may appear differently on your phone. Your content may differ from the final product or from software supplied by service providers or carriers. This content is subject to change without prior notice.
PAGE 168
Trademarks • • • • 80 LG and the LG logo are registered trademarks of LG Electronics. Bluetooth® is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc. worldwide. Wi-Fi® and the Wi-Fi logo are registered trademarks of the Wi-Fi Alliance. All other trademarks and copyrights are the property of their respective owners.
PAGE 169
Accessories These accessories are available for use with the your phone. (Items described below may be optional.) • • • • • Travel adaptor Quick Start Guide Stereo headset USB cable Battery NOTE: • Always use genuine LG accessories. The supplied items are designed only for this device and may not be compatible with other devices. • The items supplied with the device and any available accessories may vary depending on the region or service provider.
PAGE 170
Troubleshooting This chapter lists some problems you might encounter when using your phone. Some problems require you to call your service provider, but most are easy to fix yourself. Message Possible causes Possible corrective measures SIM or USIM card error There is no SIM or USIM card in the phone or it is inserted incorrectly. Make sure that the SIM or USIM card is correctly inserted. Signal is weak or you are outside the carrier network. Move toward a window or into an open area.
PAGE 171
Message No applications can be set Calls not available Phone cannot be turned on Charging error Troubleshooting Possible causes Possible corrective measures Not supported by service provider or registration required. Contact your service provider. Dialing error New network not authorized. New SIM or USIM card inserted. Check for new restrictions. Pre-paid charge limit reached. Contact service provider or reset limit with PIN2. On/Off key pressed too briefly.
PAGE 172
Message 84 Possible causes Possible corrective measures Number not allowed. The Fixed dialling number function is on. Check the Settings menu and turn the function off. Impossible to receive/ send SMS & photos Memory full Delete some messages from your phone. Files do not open Unsupported file format Check the supported file formats. The screen does not turn on when I receive a call.
PAGE 173
FAQ Category Question Answer Bluetooth Devices What functions are available via Bluetooth? You can connect a Bluetooth audio device, such as a Stereo/Mono headset or car kit. Contacts Backup How can I back up Contacts? Contacts data can be synchronized between your phone and your Google account. Is it possible to set up Synchronization one-way sync with Gmail? Only two-way synchronization is available.
PAGE 174
Category Question Message Time My phone does not display the time of receipt for messages older than 24 hrs. How can I view the time? Open the conversation and touch and hold the desired message. Then tap Details. Navigation Is it possible to install another navigation application on my phone? Any application that is available at Play Store™ and is compatible with the hardware can be installed and used.
PAGE 175
Category Unlock Pattern FAQ Question How do I create the Unlock Pattern? Answer 1. From the Home screen, touch and hold . 2. Tap System settings > Display tab > Lock screen. 3. Tap Select screen lock > Pattern. The first time you do this, a short tutorial about creating an Unlock Pattern appears. 4. Set up your pattern by drawing it then drawing it a second time for confirmation. Precautions to take when using the pattern lock. It is very important to remember the unlock pattern you set.
PAGE 176
Category Answer Unlock Pattern What should I do if I forget the unlock pattern and I did not create my Google account on the phone? If you forgot your pattern: If you logged into your Google account on the phone but failed to enter the correct pattern 5 times, tap the Forgot pattern button. You are then required to log in with your Google account to unlock your phone. If you have not created a Google account on the phone or you have forgotten it, you must perform a hard reset.
PAGE 177
Category Question Answer 1. From the Home screen, touch and My screen turns off hold . after only 15 seconds. 2. Tap System settings > Display tab. Screen time How can I change the out 3. Tap Screen timeout. amount of time for the 4. Tap the preferred screen backlight backlight to turn off? timeout time.
PAGE 178
Category Answer Alarm Can I use music files for my alarm? Yes. After saving a music file as a ringtone, you can use it as an alarm. 1. Touch and hold a song in a library list. In the menu that opens, tap Set as ringtone > Phone ringtone or Caller ringtones. 2. On the Alarm Clock Setting screen, select the song as a ringtone. Alarm Will my alarm be audible or will it go off if the phone is turned off? No, this is not supported.
PAGE 179